Ford 2010 E 150 Owners Manual

2010 E-150 to the manual 3413ee62-4007-414b-9543-3c00d609b201

2014-12-13

: Ford Ford-2010-E-150-Owners-Manual-123355 ford-2010-e-150-owners-manual-123355 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 324 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 14
Warning lights and chimes 14
Gauges 19
Message center 21
Entertainment Systems 29
AM/FM stereo 29
AM/FM stereo with CD 31
Auxiliary input jack 38
USB port 40
Satellite radio information 43
Navigation system 46
SYNC威46
Climate Controls 47
Heater only 47
Manual heating and air conditioning 48
Lights 50
Headlamps 50
Turn signal control 54
Bulb replacement 55
Driver Controls 62
Windshield wiper/washer control 62
Steering wheel adjustment 63
Power windows 64
Mirrors 65
Speed control 67
Upfitter controls 70
Locks and Security 72
Keys 72
Locks 72
Anti-theft system 81
Table of Contents
1
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints 85
Seating 85
Safety restraints 93
Airbags 102
Child restraints 112
Tires, Wheels and Loading 134
Tire information 136
Tire inflation 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 154
Vehicle loading 167
Trailer towing 174
Trailer brake controller-integrated 185
Recreational towing 191
Driving 192
Starting 192
Brakes 197
Traction Control™ 199
Traction Control™/AdvanceTrac威200
AdvanceTrac威200
Transmission operation 209
Reverse sensing system 217
Rear-view camera system 219
Roadside Emergencies 224
Getting roadside assistance 224
Hazard flasher control 225
Fuel pump shut-off switch 226
Fuses and relays 228
Changing tires 236
Wheel lug nut torque 244
Jump starting 245
Wrecker towing 251
Table of Contents
2
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance 253
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 259
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 259
Cleaning 260
Underbody preservation 265
Maintenance and Specifications 267
Engine compartment 269
Engine oil 271
Battery 274
Engine coolant 277
Fuel information 283
Air filter(s) 303
Part numbers 305
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 306
Engine data 310
Accessories 314
Ford Extended Service Plan 316
Index 319
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
•In the United States: www.ford.com
•In Canada: www.ford.ca
•In Australia: www.ford.com.au
•In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch (Diesel and
Stripped Chassis vehicles only): In the event of an accident
the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Introduction
4
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material –
Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Introduction
5
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Introduction
6
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation
and maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and
then by selecting “Contact Us” or by phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer.
Introduction
7
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off system.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威supplement for more information.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
•how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
•how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
•how fast the vehicle was traveling;
•where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
•longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
Introduction
8
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC威or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC威supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威supplement
for more information.
Introduction
9
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Modification Data Recording
Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage; refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle
limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle’s Warranty
Guide for more information. Some vehicles are equipped with
Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about
vehicle modifications that, for example, increase horsepower and torque
output; this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system’s
memory even if the modification is removed. When a dealer or repair
facility works on your vehicle, it may be necessary for them to access the
information in the Powertrain Control System. This information will likely
identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system,
which may be used to determine if the warranty has been violated and if
repairs will be covered by warranty.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Introduction
10
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
Introduction
11
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based Parking Aid System
Stability Control System Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Introduction
12
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter Jack
Check Fuel Cap Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Introduction
13
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, it has a unique cluster,
refer to Starting the engine in your 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke
Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Vehicles with optional message
center: Warning lights called out as
RTT are reconfigurable telltale
(RTT) indicator lights will illuminate
in the optional message center.
These lights function the same as
the other warning lights. If your
vehicle is not equipped with a
message center, the lights will appear on the cluster.
Service engine soon: The service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙
Instrument Cluster
14
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine
soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Electronic throttle control
(RTT): Displays when the engine
has defaulted to a “limp-home”
operation. Report the fault to a
dealer at the earliest opportunity.
Check fuel cap (RTT): Displays
when the fuel cap may not be
properly installed. Continued driving
with this light on may cause the
Service Engine Soon warning light
to come on, refer to Fuel filler cap
in the Maintenance and Specification chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
P!
BRAKE
Instrument Cluster
15
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound
when there is a malfunction in the indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威chime feature.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Displays when the oil pressure falls
below the normal range, refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Displays when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
ABS
Instrument Cluster
16
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Low tire pressure warning (if
equipped): Illuminates when your
tire pressure is low. If the light
remains on at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light
does not turn on or begins to flash, have the system inspected by your
authorized dealer. For more information on this system, refer to Tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter.
Traction control / AdvanceTrac威
(if equipped): Illuminates when
the traction control system or the
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately by
your authorized dealer. For further information, refer to Traction
control or AdvanceTrac威with roll stability control™ (RSC威) stability
enhancement system in the Driving chapter.
WARNING: If your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威system, then it was designed to be operated with
RSC威. Reduce speed and proceed to an authorized dealer to have the
system serviced immediately.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(if equipped): Illuminates when
the Tow/Haul feature has been
activated. Refer to the Driving
chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light flashes
steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.
Instrument Cluster
17
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock威Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Overdrive off (if equipped):
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned off; refer to the
Driving chapter. If the light does not illuminate, have the transmission
serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Charging system (RTT):
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Low fuel (RTT): Displays when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter).
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
O/D
OFF
Instrument Cluster
18
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Parking brake on warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Instrument Cluster
19
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Refer to Message center in this
chapter on how to switch the
display from metric to English.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles (kilometers) of individual journeys.
Refer to Message center in this chapter to learn how to use the trip
odometer.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates
the battery voltage when the
ignition is in the on position. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range, have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
by your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.
Instrument Cluster
20
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Selectable features (information menu)
Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem, located in the speedometer,
to scroll and reset the following functions. Select or reset the function by
holding the SELECT/RESET stem for more than two seconds.
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. To reset, press and hold for
less than two seconds.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km), to empty. Press the SELECT/RESET
stem to clear this warning message. It will return at approximately
25 miles (40 km), 10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles (0 km) to empty.
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Instrument Cluster
21
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
XX.X MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
•Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
•Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
•Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
•Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the SELECT/RESET stem (press and hold the
SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds in order to reset the function)
after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy
readings.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
COMPASS (if equipped)
The compass heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and
NW in the message center display.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is up
Instrument Cluster
22
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
to four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as
the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate
this error. Refer to Compass calibration adjustment.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Press and release the
SELECT/RESET stem to scroll
through the information displays
until the message center displays
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU.
3. Press and hold the
SELECT/RESET stem until the
message center displays HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK. Do not
hold the stem down at this point as you do not want to enter the system
check. Instead, quickly release the stem and repeatedly press it again to
scroll through the setup menu until the message center displays
COMPASS ZONE XX.
4. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for approximately two
seconds to enter the compass zone adjustment mode.
5. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem until the desired zone
number appears.
6. Release the SELECT/RESET stem and allow the setup timer to expire
to exit the procedure.
Compass calibration adjustment
Note: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away
from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater, A/C, map lamps,
wiper, etc.) and make sure all the doors are closed.
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to scroll through the
information displays until the message center displays HOLD RESET
FOR SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem until the message center
displays HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK. Do not hold the stem
down at this point as you do not want to enter the system check.
Instead, quickly release the stem and repeatedly press it again to scroll
through the setup menu until the message center displays COMPASS
ZONE XX.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Instrument Cluster
23
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for approximately two
seconds until the message center enters the compass zone adjustment
mode.
4. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem until the message center
displays CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE.
Note: This step may require up to five circles to complete the
calibration.
Note: If the SELECT/RESET stem is pressed during the calibration or
three minutes has elapsed since the beginning of the calibration without
driving the vehicle, the message center reverts back to normal operation
and the CAL will display until a successful calibration is carried out.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph (5 km/h ) until the
CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE message changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED.
Setup menu (vehicle customization and vehicle system check)
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to get into the setup menu
sequence for the following displays:
Note: When returning to the setup menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to
change back to English.
OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to display “OIL LIFE
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds and release
to reset the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
SELECT/RESET stem to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release
and press will reduce the value by 10%.
Instrument Cluster
24
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.
UNITS ENG / METRIC
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to change from English to
Metric.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for
more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
AUTOLOCK (if equipped)
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear and when the vehicle is in motion over 13 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to turn this feature on or off.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for
more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
AUTOUNLOCK (if equipped)
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to turn this feature on or off.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for
more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to turn this feature on or off.
(You can also choose to turn this feature on/off when the vehicle is
placed in reverse.)
Press the SELECT/RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for
more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Note: When entering the setup menu and a non-English language has
been selected, “PRESS RESET FOR ENGLISH” will be displayed to
change back to English.
Instrument Cluster
25
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to select a new language.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish and French
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to set the language choice.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem for the next setup menu item or wait for
more than four seconds to return to the info menu.
HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to select system check when
HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the message center.
For each of the monitored systems, the message center will indicate
either an ok message or a warning message for two seconds. Pressing the
SELECT/RESET stem cycles the message center through each of the
systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. XXX% OIL LIFE (Gas engine only)
2. ENGINE HOURS
3. ENGINE IDLE HOURS
4. CHARGING SYSTEM
5. BRAKE SYSTEM
6. TBC GAIN = XX.X
NO TRAILER (if equipped and no trailer connected)
7. TBC GAIN = XX.X
OUTPUT = ////// (if equipped and trailer connected)
8. XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
•Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
Instrument Cluster
26
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
•Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
•Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing the
SELECT/RESET stem. This allows you to use the full message center
functionality by clearing the message.
If the message will not reset or clear when pressing the SELECT/RESET
stem, you must address the problem in order to clear the message.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is
applied (or not fully released).
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early
reminder of a low fuel condition.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime if there are certain faults in the vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. Refer to Trailer towing in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Instrument Cluster
27
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse). Refer to Reverse sensing system in the
Driving chapter.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped) — Displayed when one or more
tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your
Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system inspected by
your authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For
more information on how the system operates under these conditions,
refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 5% or less. When oil life left is between 5% and 0%, the
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%, the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed. OIL LIFE
OK displays after you have changed the oil.
Instrument Cluster
28
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo system (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which
allows you to operate the radio and other electrical accessories for up to
ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front
door is opened.
1. /: Press / to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings.
Entertainment Systems
29
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly
to gain access to the following
settings:
BAL (Balance): Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting.
Use / / SEEK to adjust the audio between the left (L) and
right (R) speakers.
FAD (Fade)–If equipped with four speaker audio system: Press
AUDIO to reach the fade feature. Use / / SEEK to adjust
the audio between the front (F) and back (B) speakers.
TREB (Treble): Press to adjust the treble setting. Use / /
SEEK to adjust.
BASS (Bass): Press to adjust the bass setting. Use / /
SEEK to adjust.
3. SEEK: Press SEEK to
access the previous/next strong
station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns. You can save up to
18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
5. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press
VOL-PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn
VOL-PUSH to increase/decrease
volume.
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between displaying the radio
frequency and the clock setting.
Entertainment Systems
30
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting the clock: Press and hold CLK until the hours begin to flash.
Press / / SEEK to manually increase/decrease the hours.
Press CLK again to set the minutes using / / SEEK to
manually increase/decrease the minutes. Allow 10 seconds to pass to
confirm that the time has been set.
AM/FM Single CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system
(if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the radio and other electrical devices may be used for up to
ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is
opened.
Entertainment Systems
31
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. /(Tuner): Press to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Also use in menu mode
to select various settings.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press / to tune to the
next/previous channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press /to scroll through the list of
available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to
Category under Menu for further information.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
2. (Phone): If your vehicle is
equipped with SYNC威, press to
access SYNC PHONE features. For
further information, please refer to the SYNC威supplement.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display will read NO
PHONE.
3. MENU: Press repeatedly to
access the following settings:
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES is
displayed. Use /to manually increase/decrease. Press MENU again
to disengage clock mode.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio
menu. Press /to cycle through the following options:
•CATEGORY: Press OK to enter category mode. Press / to
scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop,
Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that
specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select
CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels.
•SAVE SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song in the
system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
Entertainment Systems
32
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 songs. If you attempt to save a song when the
system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to
access the saved songs and press /to cycle through the saved
songs. When the song appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
•DELETE SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press /to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
delete the currently listed song, press /to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
•DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
•ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press OK to enable/disable
the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are
playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system default is disabled.)
SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear in the display. The
menu listing will display the opposite state. For example, if you have
chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu listing will read DISABLE
as the alerts are currently on, so your other option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
AUTOSET: Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET. Autoset
allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Use / to
turn on/off.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Entertainment Systems
33
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
RBDS: Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RBDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, INFORM, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate, press MENU repeatedly until RBDS (ON/OFF) appears in
the display. Use /to toggle RBDS ON/OFF. When RBDS is OFF,
you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the
station name or type.
To search for specific RBDS music categories: When the desired
category appears in the display, press /to find the desired type,
then press and release SEEK, SEEK or press and hold SCAN to
begin the search.
To view the station name or type: When the desired category appears
in the display, press TEXT/SCAN to toggle between displaying the station
type (COUNTRY, ROCK, etc.) or the station name (WYCD, WXYZ, etc.).
BASS: Press MENU to reach the bass setting. Use /to adjust.
TREB (Treble): Press MENU to reach the treble setting. Use / to
adjust.
BAL (Balance): Press MENU to reach the balance setting. Use /
to adjust the audio between the left (L) and right (R) speakers. Press
OK to close and return to the main menu.
FADE (If equipped with four speaker audio system): Press MENU
to reach the fade setting. Use /to adjust the audio between the
back (B) and front (F) speakers.
SPEED VOL (Speed sensitive volume, if equipped): Press MENU to
reach the SPEEDVOL setting. Radio volume automatically gets louder
with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Use /to adjust.
The default setting is off; increasing your vehicle speed will not change
the volume level.
Adjust 1–7: Increasing this setting from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest
setting) allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Entertainment Systems
34
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRACK/FOLDER MODE: Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode.
In track mode, press SEEK, SEEK to scroll through all tracks on
the disc.
In folder mode, press SEEK, SEEK to scroll through tracks
within the selected folder.
Press FOLDER, FOLDER to access the previous/next folder (if
available).
COMPRESS (Compression): Available only in CD/MP3 mode. Press
MENU until COMPRESS ON/OFF appears in the display. Use / to
toggle ON/OFF. When COMPRESS is ON, the system will bring the soft
and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
4. AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle
through LINE IN (auxiliary audio
mode), SYNC威, SAT1, SAT2 and
SAT3 modes (satellite radio, if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
5. SEEK: In radio mode,
press /to access the
previous/next strong station.
In CD mode, press / to
access the previous/next CD track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK, SEEK to
seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), press SEEK, SEEK to seek to the
previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold
SEEK, SEEK to fast seek through the previous /next channels.
In TEXT MODE, press SEEK, SEEK to view the
previous/additional display text.
In CATEGORY MODE, press SEEK, SEEK to select a
category.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Entertainment Systems
35
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. /OK
(Play/Pause): This control is
operational in CD/MP3 mode. When
a CD/MP3 is playing, press to pause or play the current CD/MP3. The
CD/MP3 status will display in the radio display.
OK: Use in various menu selections.
7. SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to
engage shuffle mode. SHUFFLE ON
will appear in the display. If you
wish to engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. CD SHUF will appear in the display.
To disengage, press SHUFFLE. SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display.
Note: In track mode, all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in
random order. In MP3 folder mode, the system will randomly play all
tracks within the current folder.
8. FOLDER : In folder mode,
press FOLDER to access next
folder on MP3 discs, if available.
9. FOLDER: In folder mode,
press FOLDER to access the
previous folder on MP3 discs, if
available.
10. FF (Fast forward): Press FF
to manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
11. REW (Rewind): Press REW to
manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.
12. Memory presets: To set a
station, select the desired frequency
band, AM, FM1 or FM2. Tune to the
desired station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 18 stations,
six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
Entertainment Systems
36
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD/MP3 mode, press and hold for
a brief sampling of radio stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name, and
disc title.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to enter
TEXT MODE and display the current song title. While in TEXT MODE,
press again to scroll through the current song title, artist, channel
category and the SIRIUS long channel name.
In TEXT MODE, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the “>” indicator is active, press SEEK to view the
additional display text. When the “<” indicator is active, press SEEK
to view the previous display text.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop. In CATEGORY
MODE, press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the
selected category. Press again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease
volume.
Note: If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level
when the ignition switch is turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already loaded
into the system, CD/MP3 play will
begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded, NO DISC will appear in the
display.
Entertainment Systems
37
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
17. (CD eject): Press to eject a
CD.
18. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up in the CD slot.
Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack, located on the
instrument panel near the radio,
provides a way to connect your
portable music player to the
in-vehicle audio system. This allows
the audio from a portable music
player to be played through the
vehicle speakers with high fidelity.
To achieve optimal performance,
please observe the following
instructions when attaching your
portable music device to the audio
system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system, refer to
Auxiliary input jack section in the
Audio features chapter of your
Navigation system supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
Entertainment Systems
38
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persist, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
Entertainment Systems
39
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port located on the instrument
panel. This feature allows you to
plug in media playing devices,
memory sticks, and also to charge
devices if they support this feature.
For further information on this
feature, refer to Accessing and
using your USB port in the SYNC威
supplement or Navigation system
supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Entertainment Systems
40
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
•Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
•Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
•Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
•Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
•Inspect discs before playing.
•Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
•Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
•Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
•Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Entertainment Systems
41
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Entertainment Systems
42
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS威broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS威satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS威at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
•Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
11
2
.mp3
2
.mp3
3
.mp3
34
.mp3
64 .mp3
7
.mp3
.doc
.ppt
.xls
5
.mp3
Entertainment Systems
43
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
•Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS威satellite radio service: SIRIUS威satellite radio is a
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,
news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order
to receive SIRIUS威service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS威satellite radio system include hardware and a limited
subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player
and other SIRIUS威features, please contact SIRIUS威at 1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS威reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS威. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number
on the radio display by pressing the AUX and preset 1 controls
simultaneously.
Entertainment Systems
44
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required
ACQUIRING Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for
the selected
channel.
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
SAT FAULT Internal module or
system failure
present.
If this message does not
clear within a short period
of time, or with an ignition
key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer
available.
This previously available
channel is no longer
available. Tune to another
channel. If the channel was
one of your presets, you
may choose another
channel for that preset
button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS威at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the channel or
tune to another channel.
NO TEXT Artist information
not available.
Artist information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
NO TEXT Song title
information not
available.
Song title information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
Entertainment Systems
45
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required
NO TEXT Category
information not
available.
Category information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS威satellite
or SIRIUS威tower to
the vehicle antenna.
You are in a location that is
blocking the SIRIUS威signal
(i.e., tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威satellite
radio.
Call SIRIUS威at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNC姞(IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC威supplement.
Entertainment Systems
46
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
FLR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
the floor vents.
:Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
•To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
•To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select MIX.
2. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to HI.
Climate Controls
47
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Also controls the airflow for the rear auxiliary system (if
equipped). See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. If equipped with auxiliary A/C, auxiliary
airflow will be from the rear headliner vents.
NORM A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. If equipped with auxiliary A/C, auxiliary
airflow will be from the rear headliner vents.
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
FLR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents. If equipped with
rear auxiliary heater or A/C, auxiliary airflow will be from the rear floor
vents.
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents. If equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A/C, auxiliary
airflow will be from the rear floor vents.
:Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. If
equipped with rear auxiliary heater or A/C, auxiliary airflow will be from
the rear floor vents.
Climate Controls
48
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Operating tips
•To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
•To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF position.
•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C position, turn off the rear A/C unit (if equipped), reduce
blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle’s
transmission into the PARK gear position to continue to receive cool air
from your A/C system.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select MIX.
2. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to HI.
REAR FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear fan controls adjust the
volume of air circulated in the rear
of the vehicle.
Climate Controls
49
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
•the ignition must be in the on position and
•the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever toward you to deactivate.
Lights
50
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
illuminated switches in the vehicle
during headlamp and parklamp
operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Note: If the battery is disconnected,
discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions
The dome lamp will not illuminate if the control switch is not rotated
past the detent.
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AIM ADJUSTMENT
(SEALED BEAM HEADLAMPS)
The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using
mechanical aimers. If mechanical aimers are used and the cross-car sight
line is in any way blocked, set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the
same setting, such that the cross-car sight line is no longer blocked, per
the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used. You can also
aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below.
Lights
51
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern.
•(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(2) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(4) Horizontal reference line
•(5) Center of headlamps
•(6) Center line of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is
marked either on the lens (a circle
or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the
ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the
wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the top
edge of the intensity zone even with
the horizontal reference line (4). If
the top edge of the high intensity
area is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to adjust
it.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster (1)
for each headlamp. Adjust the aim
by turning the adjuster control
either clockwise (to adjust up) or
counterclockwise (to adjust down).
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical
lines (5) must be marked at the
center line of the headlamps on the
wall or screen.
Lights
52
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow
the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster (2) for each headlamp. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the high
intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp
under adjustment.
VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT (AERODYNAMIC HEADLAMPS)
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
•(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(2) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
Lights
53
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the back of each headlamp, then use
a long Phillips #2 screwdriver to
turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise (to adjust down)
or clockwise (to adjust up) aligning
the upper edge of the light pattern
up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
•Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
•Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps with rear headliner
Dome lamps equipped with an
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light
when:
•doors are closed and the control
is in the ON position
•control is in the DOOR position
and any door is open
•headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you
open the doors or fully rotate the headlamp control.
Lights
54
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cargo lamps
The dome portion of the cargo
lamp, the center light, can be turned
on when the headlamp control is
rotated fully counterclockwise or
when any door is opened.
With the ignition key in the accessory or on position, the rear lamp can
be turned on or off by sliding the control.
Front and rear courtesy/reading
lamps
The dome portion of the lamp, the
center light, can be turned on when
the headlamp control is rotated fully
counterclockwise or when any door
is opened.
The reading lamp portion, the two outer lights, can only be toggled on
and off at the lamp.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
•Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Lights
55
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
•Water puddle inside the lamp
•Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of
bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps (aerodynamic) 2 H13/9008
Headlamps (sealed beam) 2 H6054
Park lamp with aerodynamic 2 3157A or
3157AK
Park lamp with sealed beam 2 3157K
Side marker with aerodynamic 2 168
Side marker with sealed beam 2 194
Back-up lamps 2 3156K or 3156
License plate lamp 1 168
Stop/tail/turn/side marker lamp 2 3157K
High-mount brakelamp 2 912
Cargo lamp 1 211-2
Dome lamp (standard) 1 912
Map/reading lamp 2 211-2
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
Lights
56
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the three screws from
the headlamp assembly and pull the
assembly straight out.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward, then pulling it rearward.
4. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
alcohol before being used.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Lights
57
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing headlamps (sealed beam)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the four screws from the
headlamp assembly and carefully
remove the lamp/bezel.
3. Remove the four screws and the
retaining ring.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the lamp and
remove the lamp.
To install the new lamp, follow the
removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs
in this section.
Aerodynamic
Sealed beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Lights
58
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing side marker bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs
in this section.
Aerodynamic
Sealed beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Lights
59
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs
On vehicles without a rear headliner, the interior cargo lamp (if
equipped) must be removed from under the high-mount brakelamp
assembly located inside the vehicle. Then, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws from the
high-mount brakelamp assembly and
lift the lamp from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
license plate lamp assembly from
the rear door.
3. Remove bulb socket from lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out from socket and
push in the new bulb.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Lights
60
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing stop/turn/tail/side marker/backup lamp bulbs
The stop/turn/tail/side marker/backup lamp bulbs are located in the tail
lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace any of the bulbs:
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
off position, then remove the four
screws and the lamp assembly from
the vehicle.
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it
from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
To install the lamp, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Lights
61
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
•briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
•a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•a long press and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Driver Controls
62
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
•On the instrument panel, equipped with a cover or a cap plug
•Behind the driver’s seat on the upper trim panel (if equipped)
•In the glove box (if equipped)
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
Driver Controls
63
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point is not
working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and relays in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and
replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
•do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
•do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
•Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
•Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Driver Controls
64
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
One-touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches and radio may be used for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position, or
until any door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror that has
an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change
from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Driver Controls
65
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: If equipped with a reverse camera system, a video image will
display in the mirror or the Navigation system display (if equipped)
when the vehicle is put in R (Reverse). As you shift into any other gear
from R (Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn
off. Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Spotter mirror (if equipped)
Note: New spotter mirrors may be stiff, requiring several cycles before
the spotter adjustment effort eases.
Spotter mirror on standard
mirror (if equipped)
The spotter mirror only can be tilted
from top to bottom. Move the lower
mirror manually up/down to increase
side and rear visibility. Apply
pressure only in the center of the
spotter mirror along the top or
bottom edges to adjust the tilt feature. Do not apply any force on the
left or right edges of the standard mirror spotter section, as this
may lead to a mirror fracture.
Driver Controls
66
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Spotter mirror on telescoping
mirror (if equipped)
The spotter mirror has a swivel that
allows it to tilt up and down, and
also to tilt left and right to increase
side and rear visibility.
Fold-away mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow
spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a
garage with the trailer tow mirror.
The telescoping feature (if
equipped) allows the mirror to
extend approximately 3.15 inches
(80 mm). This feature is especially
useful to the driver when towing a
trailer.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Driver Controls
67
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Using speed control
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following
buttons work with speed control.
ON: Press to turn on speed control.
OFF: Press to turn off speed
control.
RES (Resume): Press to resume a
set speed.
SET/ACCEL: Press to set a speed
or increase a set speed.
COAST: Press to reduce a set speed.
Setting speed control
1. Press and release ON.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET/ACCEL.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
•Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
•If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
•If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage speed control, press the brake pedal. Disengaging speed
control will not erase the previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press and release RES. This will automatically return the vehicle to the
previously set speed.
Driver Controls
68
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Increasing speed while using speed control
To increase the set speed:
•Press and hold SET/ACCEL until you get to the desired speed, then
release. You can also use SET/ACCEL to operate the tap-up function.
Press and release SET/ACCEL to increase the vehicle set speed in
1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments.
•Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed, press and release SET/ACCEL.
Reducing speed while using speed control
To reduce the set speed:
•Press and hold COAST until you get to the desired speed, then
release. You can also use COAST to operate the tap-down function.
Press and release COAST to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increments.
•Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached, then
press and release SET/ACCEL.
Turning off speed control
To turn off the speed control, press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
SYNC威system hands free
control feature (if equipped)
Press briefly to use the voice
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
hold to exit voice command.
Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call. Press and
hold to end a call or exit phone mode.
For further information on the SYNC威system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
Driver Controls
69
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation system/SYNC威hands
free control features (if
equipped)
Press control briefly until the
voice icon appears on the
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call. Press and
hold to exit phone mode or end a call.
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC威system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC威supplements.
UPFITTER CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
the Upfitter option package which
will provide four switches, mounted
in the center of the instrument
panel, labeled AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3
and AUX 4. These switches will only
operate while the ignition is in the
on position, whether the engine is
running or not. It is, however, recommended that the engine remain
running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for
extended duration or higher current draws. (This is even more important
for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining
battery power when the ignition key is in the on position.)
When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps, 15 amps or
30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or
commercial uses.
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, a relay/fuse kit will be
included. This kit contains the required fuses and relays that need to be
installed into the Power Distribution Box located under the hood. Refer
to the instruction sketch included in the kit and Fuses and Relays in
the Roadside Emergencies chapter. See your authorized dealer for
service.
There will also be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located in the underhood cowl shield above the engine
block PCM.
Driver Controls
70
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
They are coded as follows:
Switch Circuit number Wire color Fuse
AUX 1 CAC05 Yellow 30A
AUX 2 CAC06 Green with
Brown Trace
30A
AUX 3 CAC07 Violet with
Green Trace
10A
AUX 4 CAC08 Brown 15A
More detailed information about Upfitter switches can be found at
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.
Driver Controls
71
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an
emergency.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock威Passive Anti-theft
system, your keys are electronically coded to your vehicle; using a
non-coded key will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your
dealer supplied keys, replacement keys are available through your
authorized dealer.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Memory lock
If you lock your doors with the power lock switch or the remote
transmitter while the sliding door is open, the door will automatically
lock after it is closed.
Autolock feature
Note: Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled.
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
•all the doors are closed,
•the ignition is in the on position,
•you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
•the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than two seconds.
Locks and Security
72
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The autolock feature repeats when:
•any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
•the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than two seconds.
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature disabled; there are three
methods to enable/disable this feature:
•Through your authorized dealer, or
•by using a power door unlock/lock procedure, or
•by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Locks and Security
73
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
•the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
•the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to
accessory; and
•the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features disabled; there are
three methods to enable/disable this feature:
•Through your authorized dealer, or
•by using a power door unlock/lock sequence, or
•by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back on. The horn will chirp one time to confirm
programming mode has been entered and is active.
Locks and Security
74
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Back cargo door lock (if equipped)
The passenger side rear cargo door
has a power door lock control
mounted on the inside of the door.
When this lock is pressed, all doors
will lock/unlock.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ (if equipped)
The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ insures that the side and cargo
doors are double locked for extra security.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ features
•The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ is available with either power
or manual door locks.
•The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ provides extra security via a
double-locked design.
•The cargo doors can only be unlocked from the outside by using the
keys.
•The power unlock feature (if equipped with power door locks) will
only unlock the front doors.
•The E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ is equipped with an
emergency unlock handle installed in the door inner panel.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ procedure
For vehicles equipped with power door locks:
•Lock the vehicle with the key, manual door lock, key fob or use the
power door lock on the front door trim panel. The front doors are
locked and the cargo doors are double-locked.
Locks and Security
75
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Unlock the vehicle with the key fob or use the power door lock on the
front door. The front doors are unlocked and the cargo doors remain
double-locked.
•The only way to unlock the side or back cargo doors from
outside vehicle is with the key.
For vehicles equipped with manual door locks:
•The front door locks can be locked by using either the key or the
manual door lock.
•In order to activate the E-Guard Cargo Protection System™, use the
key or the manual door lock to lock the side and back cargo doors.
•The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using the manual door
lock.
WARNING: If equipped with E-Guard Cargo Protection
System™ occupants may become trapped in the cargo area
unless the exit procedure is followed. The cargo doors cannot be
unlocked using manual or power door locks or key fob. In an
emergency, to exit the cargo area, locate the emergency handle in the
rear door or side door, pull the emergency handle to unlock the door,
then unlatch the door using the inside release handle.
Emergency lock release
The emergency handle in the door trim panel unlocks the E-Guard Cargo
Protection System™.
The emergency handles are located in the following areas:
•The side door emergency handle
is located on the door inner trim
panel in the speaker cup.
Locks and Security
76
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•The rear door handle is located in
the rear door below the glass.
To open the side or back cargo doors from the inside:
1. Unlock the E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ using the emergency
handle.
2. Unlatch the door using the inside release handle.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
•weather conditions,
•nearby radio towers,
•structures around the vehicle, or
•other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
Locks and Security
77
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key.
Note: The lock and unlock features
work when the ignition is in any
position. The panic feature is active
when the ignition is in either the
accessory, off or on positions.
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer
in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with the E-Guard Cargo Protection
System™ the remote transmitter Unlock command will only unlock the
front doors; the only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from
outside the vehicle is with the key.
Two step door unlocking
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to
the off position.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors and the rear cargo doors.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamp 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to the off position.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press and release
once to unlock the passenger doors and the rear cargo doors. Note: The
interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature
later in this section), if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to
the off position.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled. With the vehicle
locked, unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door
unlocking by pressing and holding both the and buttons
simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four
seconds and release. The park lamps will flash twice to indicate that the
Locks and Security
78
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
vehicle has switched to one step unlocking. Repeat the procedure to
switch back to two-step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. If all doors are closed the
parking lamps illuminate.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the
turn lamps will flash and the horn will chirp once. If any door is ajar the
lamps will not flash and the horn will chirp twice.
Car finder
Press twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. Press the control again, or turn the
ignition to the accessory or on position to deactivate the alarm.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off
position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
Locks and Security
79
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct
orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the
battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure. If all remote entry transmitters
are not present during programming procedure, the ones missing during
programming will no longer operate the vehicle.
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not
depressed during this sequence.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Place the key in the ignition and
turn from the 2 (lock) position to 3
(off).
3
1
2
5
4
Locks and Security
80
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (off)
position and 4 (on). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (on)
position.
4. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
5. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
6. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
7. Repeat step 5 to program each additional remote entry transmitter
(up to four transmitters).
8. Turn the ignition to the 3 (off) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.
9. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
•the ignition switch is turned to the on or accessory position, or
•the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
•they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
•any door is open.
SECURILOCK姞PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock威passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
Locks and Security
81
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles equipped with the
SecuriLock威Passive Anti-theft
system behave as follows:
•When the ignition is in the off
position, the indicator will flash once every two seconds for a total of
10 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock威system is functioning as a
theft deterrent.
•When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and
the SecuriLock威Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock威Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
•When the ignition is in the off position, the indicator will not flash.
•When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the
vehicle.
Locks and Security
82
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock威keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 3 (off) position to the 4 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 4
(on) position for at least one
second, but no more than
10 seconds).
2. Turn ignition from the 4 (on)
position back to the 3 (off) position
in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition.
3. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from the 3 (off) position to the 4 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 4 (on) position for at least one second
but no more than 10 seconds).
3
1
2
5
4
Locks and Security
83
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Turn the ignition from the 4 (on) position back to the 3 (off) position
in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the second
coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into
the ignition and turn the ignition from the 3 (off) position to the 4 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 4 (on) position for at least one second,
but no more than 10 seconds). This step will program your new key to a
coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer
to have the new spare key(s) programmed.
Locks and Security
84
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Non-adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard non-adjustable head
restraints.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the seatback is placed in its proper
position. The driver should never adjust the seatback while the vehicle
is in motion.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of a trimmed foam covering
over the upper structure of the
seatback.
Properly adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position, so that
the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your
head.
Seating and Safety Restraints
85
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
WARNING: Before
returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not
trapped behind the seatback. After
returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the
seatback to ensure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of
a sudden stop or collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
86
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support control is
located on the inboard side of the
driver’s seat.
Turn the lumbar support control
clockwise to increase firmness.
Turn the lumbar support control
counterclockwise to increase
softness.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Seating and Safety Restraints
87
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
REAR SEATS
Rear captains chair adjust — passenger side only
Pull the lever to adjust the seat
forward or backward.
Seating and Safety Restraints
88
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Quick-release captains chair
(7 passenger configuration- second row only)
To remove the seat:
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt
from the seat by inserting a key or
small screwdriver into the slot in the
detachable anchor and lifting
upward.
2. Pull the seat latch handle, then
pull the seat toward the right side of
the vehicle to disengage four pins
from the floor mount.
3. Remove the seat.
To install the seat:
WARNING: Check to see that the seat and seatback is latched
securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would
prevent proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor
by pushing/pulling on the seat. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
Seating and Safety Restraints
89
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Position the seat to the floor
mount.
2. Pull the seat latch handle downward to lock the seat in position.
3. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, then insert the safety belt
tongue into detachable anchor until you hear a “click” and feel the latch
engage.
Rear bench seat
To remove the seats:
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt
from the seat by inserting a key or
small screwdriver into the slot in the
detachable anchor and lifting
upward (2nd row passenger side
only).
Seating and Safety Restraints
90
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Find the clips attached near the
ends of the lap/shoulder belts.
3. Clip the end of the belt to the
stationary portion of the shoulder
belt coming out of the trim panel.
The end of the shoulder belt must
be clipped in order to keep it from
striking anything during vehicle
operation.
Seating and Safety Restraints
91
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. With assistance, pull the LH/RH seat latch release straps (1) (located
behind the latch mechanisms) to release the latch from the rear strikers.
5. Lift the rear end of seat upward and rearward by pushing on the
seatback (2) and lifting the seat cushion (3) to disengage the front seat
hook and the rear seat latch from the striker.
6. With assistance, remove the seat assembly.
•To remove the 3rd, 4th, and 5th row seats (if equipped), repeat
Steps 1 through 6.
To install the seat:
WARNING: Ensure that the seat is installed or removed from
the striker pins with adequate ergonomic assistance. Due to the
weight of the seat, it must be handled by at least two adults during
installation or removal from the vehicle.
WARNING: Ensure that the seat is latched to the vehicle floor
by pushing/pulling on the seat or seatback (2). If not latched,
the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop.
1. Please make sure the floor striker area is clean of any debris that
would prevent the seat from latching.
2. With assistance, position the seat in the vehicle.
3. Align the front hooks to the LH/RH front striker pins prior to lowering
the rear latch mechanism and aligning them with the rear striker pins.
Seating and Safety Restraints
92
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Engage the front LH/RH hooks to the LH/RH front striker pins.
5. After the front LH/RH hooks are engaged to the LH/RH front striker
pins, pull LH/RH seat latch release straps to allow engagement of the
latch to the striker pins. Refer to the illustration in To remove the rear
seats above.
6. Pull/push seat back forward/backward to check for proper seat
installation.
WARNING: Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether
the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNING: Do not hang or attach any cargo to the release
straps of the rear bench seats. Doing so could cause the release
straps to inadvertently unlatch the rear bench seat. If not latched, the
seat may cause serious injury during a sudden stop.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Seating and Safety Restraints
93
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
Seating and Safety Restraints
94
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Front and rear seats
2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
•Front and rear seats
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have three
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating position (if
Seating and Safety Restraints
95
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
equipped). Children 12 years old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible. Refer to Safety
restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
•Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
•Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
•Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems
at all seating positions (except the driver position, which does
not have this feature) must be checked by an authorized dealer to
verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be checked for
proper function.
Seating and Safety Restraints
96
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Front safety belt height adjustment
The front seat and outboard
positions are equipped with a height
adjuster. Adjust the height of the
shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. Release the button
and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place. To adjust the belt upward,
slide the adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
97
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and the
warning chime will remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
Seating and Safety Restraints
98
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled approximately
5 seconds after the safety belt
warning light has turned off...
The Belt-Minder威feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The Belt-Minder威feature will not
activate.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The Belt-Minder威feature will not
activate.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1in4ofuswillbe
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Seating and Safety Restraints
99
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Reasons given... Consider...
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” People who are ejected are 40
times more likely to DIE. Safety
belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T
“PICK OUR CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s air bag
system
One-time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition on cycle, the Belt-Minder威will be disabled for that ignition cycle
only.
Seating and Safety Restraints
100
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞feature
Read Steps1-5thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The Belt-Minder威feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
•the parking brake is set
•the gearshift is in P (Park)
•the ignition switch is in the off position
•all vehicle doors and the hood are closed
•the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
•the parklamps/headlamps are in the off position
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately one
minute).
•Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
•After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for three seconds.
•Belt-Minder威will automatically exit programming mode without
changing its enable status if Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds
of the end of Step 3.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
•This will disable the Belt-Minder威feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
Seating and Safety Restraints
101
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•This will enable the Belt-Minder威feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
5. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there isa9inch
(23 cm) or 12 inch (31 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be
added (part number 611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Use the shortest extender assembly that will provide adequate fit.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Seating and Safety Restraints
102
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
a rear seating position, and always properly use appropriate child
restraints. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must transport a forward-facing child in the front seat,
move the seat all the way back and use appropriate restraints.
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the air bag module as a
deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
103
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the air bag module.
Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment may affect the performance of
the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury.
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Seating and Safety Restraints
104
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains a
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the airbag sensors to close
an electrical circuit that initiates
airbag inflation. The fact that the
airbags did not inflate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not sufficient
enough to cause activation. Airbags
are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
•driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
•one or more impact and safing sensors
Seating and Safety Restraints
105
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•safety belt pretensioners
•a readiness light and tone
•a diagnostic module
•and the electrical wiring which connects the components
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
•The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
•The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威)or
the safety belt pretensioners.
Seating and Safety Restraints
106
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
•pressing the hazard control button,
•or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)
Note: The passenger airbag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped) may be on
vehicles with no rear seats and a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
greater than 8500 lb (3856 kg). See
Vehicle loading – with and
without a trailer in the Tires,
Wheels and loading chapter.
WARNING: An airbag
ON/OFF switch (if
equipped) may have been installed
in this vehicle. Before driving,
always look at the face of the
switch to be sure the switch is in
the proper position in accordance
with these instructions and
warnings. Failure to put the
switch in a proper position can
increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
107
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Turning the passenger airbag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in
OFF position while removing the
key.
2. When the ignition is turned to the
ON position the OFF light
illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger
airbag is deactivated.
WARNING: If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air
bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in
ON, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON/OFF switch.
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless
the passenger airbag is turned off.
Turning the passenger airbag back on
The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON.
2. The OFF light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to On. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
Seating and Safety Restraints
108
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in
ON, have the passenger airbag switch serviced at an authorized dealer
immediately.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn OFF your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the
airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a
person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport
Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport
children who are 12 and younger in a rear seating position.
Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. DO NOT place a
child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag ON/OFF switch and the passenger airbag is
turned OFF. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to
the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
Seating and Safety Restraints
109
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
•the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
•causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a
crash.
Seating and Safety Restraints
110
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents
to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
•the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
Seating and Safety Restraints
111
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
•poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents
to reduce concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the
risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a
crash, if the airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt
might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is
turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA
deactivation criteria.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Seating and Safety Restraints
112
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Seating and Safety Restraints
113
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended re-
straint type
Infants
or tod-
dlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger)
Use a child safety
seat (sometimes
called an infant car-
rier, convertible
seat, or toddler
seat).
Small
chil-
dren
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat
(generally children who are less than
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward
to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer)
Use a belt-
positioning booster
seat.
Larger
chil-
dren
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a belt-positioning
booster seat (generally children who are
at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer)
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
across the hips,
shoulder belt cen-
tered across the
shoulder and chest,
and seatback up-
right.
•You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
114
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Re-
straint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated be-
low by “X”
LATCH
(lower
an-
chors
and
top
tether
an-
chor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear fac-
ing child
seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XXX
Forward
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Seating and Safety Restraints
115
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
Seating and Safety Restraints
116
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
•Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
•Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
117
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
•Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
Seating and Safety Restraints
118
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
Seating and Safety Restraints
119
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
Seating and Safety Restraints
120
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the
child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with
tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Seating and Safety Restraints
121
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
following locations:
•Five passenger crew van
•Seven passenger wagon
•Eight passenger wagon
•Eleven passenger wagon
Seating and Safety Restraints
122
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Twelve passenger wagon
•Fifteen passenger wagon
The LATCH lower anchors are
located at the rear section of the
rear seat between the cushion and
seatback. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
Seating and Safety Restraints
123
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
WARNING: When using forward-facing child safety seats in
vehicles with only two seating positions or the forward-facing
child safety seat cannot be placed in the rear of the vehicle, move the
passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible.
WARNING: Because the last row of seats in the 12 passenger
and 15 passenger configuration is not equipped with LATCH
anchors and is spaced closer to the row of seats in front, Do not use
forward-facing or rear-facing child seats (other than belt-positioning
boosters) in the last row.
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Seating and Safety Restraints
124
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
Front passenger seating position
The tether can be attached directly
to the rear of the front seat.
1. Adjust the front right-hand
passenger seat full forward.
Seating and Safety Restraints
125
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Route the child safety seat tether
strap over the back of the front
right-hand passenger seat as shown.
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal at the location shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
126
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Adjust the front right hand
passenger seat to the full rearward
position.
5. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
Second row bucket seats (Quads)
The tether strap can be attached
directly to the tether bracket under
the back edge of the seat cushion.
1. Route the child safety tether strap over the back of the left hand or
right hand second row bucket seat.
Seating and Safety Restraints
127
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal at the location shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
3. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
Second, Third, Fourth, and Fifth row bench seats
For the center position of a
three-passenger bench seat, the
tether strap can be attached directly
to the tether bracket provided
under the back edge of the seat
cushion. For the outboard positions,
the tether strap can be attached to
the slot in the side of the seat pedestal.
*: Although tether slots are provided on the seat pedestals of the
four–passenger bench seat, use of child seats is not recommended for
these seating position locations.
1. For any three–passenger bench seat, place the child safety seat on the
left hand outboard position, the center position, or the right hand
outboard position as desired.
*
*
Seating and Safety Restraints
128
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Route the child safety tether
strap over the back of the bench
seat.
3. Clip the center tether strap hook
to the tether bracket mounted
under rear rail of seat cushion
frame. Clip the outboard tether
strap hooks to the tether bracket
slot provided on the left side of each
seat pedestal. The slot is located
between the two holes.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Seating and Safety Restraints
129
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
•Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without
slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Seating and Safety Restraints
130
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Seating and Safety Restraints
131
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Seating and Safety Restraints
132
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
133
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
•Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
•Keep tires properly inflated;
•Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
•Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
134
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
•Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
•Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
•Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
135
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
•Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
136
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
•Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
•Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
•Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires, Wheels and Loading
137
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
•B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower
than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust
if required. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford Motor Company
recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather
than a stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ⬙blowout⬙, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Tires, Wheels and Loading
138
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
139
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see
Dissimilar Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description):
Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
140
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire inflation information
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
141
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the
illustration.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
142
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
143
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
144
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (138 kPa)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (138 kPa) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (if
equipped).
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged (if equipped).
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
•Observe posted speed limits
•Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
•Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Tires, Wheels and Loading
145
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
146
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS
(tire pressure monitoring system), then the settings for the TPMS
sensors need to be updated. Always perform the TPMS reset procedure
after tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure
in this chapter.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
147
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•DRW – Six tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set/pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
148
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
149
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
150
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
•Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
•Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
•Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
151
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
152
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
153
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Tires, Wheels and Loading
154
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. There are two different types of
pressure sensors:
Snap-in sensor — the pressure
sensor is attached to the back of
the valve stem.
Banded sensor — the pressure
sensor is banded to the wheel.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
155
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In either case, the pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Care must be taken when
changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
How to identify which type of pressure sensor is on your vehicle
The wheel could have either type of pressure sensor depending on the
appearance of the valve stem:
•Rubber valve stem with snap-in
sensor- the valve stem has a
rubber seal (1) and an extra
brass shoulder, larger in diameter
and with no treads, that can be
seen when the cap is removed.
•Rubber valve stem with banded
sensor- the valve stem has a
rubber seal (1) with brass of a
uniform diameter all the way
down to the seal.
1
1
Tires, Wheels and Loading
156
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Metal valve stem with banded
sensor- the valve stem is
completely metal.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
157
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire Pres-
sure Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Solid Warning
Light
Tire(s)
under-
inflated
1. Check your tire pressure to ensure
tires are properly inflated; refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended infla-
tion pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of driver’s
door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle
must be driven for at least two min-
utes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before
the light will turn OFF.
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in use.
Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to re-
store system functionality. For a de-
scription on how the system func-
tions, refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this section.
TPMS mal-
function
If your tires are properly inflated and
your spare tire is not in use and the
light remains ON, contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
without sen-
sor training
On vehicles with different front and
rear tire pressures, the TPMS system
must be retrained following every tire
rotation. Refer to Tire rotation in
this chapter.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
158
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low Tire Pres-
sure Warning
Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Flashing Warning
Light
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in use.
Repair the damaged road wheel and
re-mount it on the vehicle to restore
system functionality. For a descrip-
tion of how the system functions un-
der these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is in-
stalled in this section.
TPMS mal-
function
If your tires are properly inflated and
your spare tire is not in use and the
TPMS warning light still flashes, con-
tact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
159
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TPMS reset procedure
The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire
pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle – refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See
Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information.
Overview
Note: Before performing either of the TPMS reset procedures below
refer to Changing tires with TPMS earlier in this section to familiarize
yourself with the type of wheels and pressure sensors on your vehicle.
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning
indicator at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for
the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
TPMS reset tips:
•To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the TPMS
reset procedure should be performed at least 3 feet (1 meter) away
from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset
procedure at the same time.
•Do not wait more than two (2) minutes between resetting each tire
sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have
to be repeated on all four wheels.
•A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
Note: Two TPMS reset procedures are given below: one for tires with
snap-in sensors and one for tires with banded sensors.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
160
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Performing the TPMS reset procedure
(Vehicles that have wheels with snap-in pressure sensors)
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least 2 minutes and
then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and
have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on
position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then
off 3 times. This must be
accomplished within ten seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center (if
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset
sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise
order:
•Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
•Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
•Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
•Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
161
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire.
Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the TPMS tell tale stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Vehicle Loading in this
chapter for more information.
Performing the TPMS reset procedure
(Vehicles that have wheels with banded pressure sensors)
TPMS reset tool
A special TPMS reset tool to reset your TPMS after tire rotation is
provided with vehicles that have different front and rear tire pressures.
The tool is located with your Owner’s Guide materials.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
162
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Please take the tool with the
provided Velcro威strip on the back
and mount it in the bottom right
corner of your Owner’s Guide case
(as shown) for safe keeping.
If you find that the reset tool was not provided when delivered, has been
lost or no longer functions (the battery is not replaceable), please
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible to obtain a
replacement.
To verify that your TPMS reset tool is working, press and release the
button on the center of the TPMS tool. The red light should illuminate
and remain on for approximately five (5) seconds. If the light does not
illuminate, the tool needs to be replaced.
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
Note: To enter the reset mode, Steps 1–6 MUST be completed within
60 seconds.
1. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
2. Press and release the brake
pedal.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
163
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Cycle the ignition from off to on
three (3) times ending in the on
position—DO NOT start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal
for two (2) seconds, then release.
5. Turn the ignition to off—DO
NOT remove the key.
6. Cycle the ignition from off to on three (3) times ending in on. DO
NOT start the engine.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center will
display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator does not flash and the message center
does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
164
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
7. Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset
sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise
order:
1. Left front tire (Front driver’s side)
2. Right front tire (Front passenger’s side)
3. Right rear tire (Rear passenger’s side)
4. Left rear tire (Rear driver’s side)
8. Left front tire: Place the TPMS reset tool against the left front tire
where the tire meets the rim, opposite from the valve stem (1) as shown.
This is where the sensor is located inside the rim.
The tool needs to be held against the tire sidewall opposite the
valve stem as illustrated with the arrow on the tool pointing
towards the rim; do not use the tool with the arrow pointing away
from the rim as it may not activate the sensor.
9. Press and release the green button and hold the tool to the tire
sidewall until the horn sounds. The red light on the TPMS reset tool will
illuminate while the tool is active. The horn will sound once within
10 seconds to indicate the process was successful.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
165
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note:
•If a double horn chirp is heard, repeat the procedure. If a single horn
chirp is not heard, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least a
1
⁄
4
-turn and repeat the procedure starting with Step 1.
•If a double horn chirp is heard even after the wheels were
repositioned, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
10. Perform Steps 8 and 9 on the right front tire, right rear tire and
finally the left rear tire. Training is complete after the horn sounds for
the last tire trained (left rear tire) and the message center displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
Turn the ignition to off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
•Use only SAE Class S chains.
•Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
166
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
•The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
167
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
168
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
169
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
170
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
171
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
172
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
•Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
•A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
Tires, Wheels and Loading
173
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Refer to 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for Diesel engine towing information.
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer, provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
174
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-150 Regular/RV Van (8520 GVWR)
4.6L 3.73 11500
(5216) 6000 (2722) 60 (5.52)
4.6L 4.10 12000
(5443) 6500 (2948) 60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular Wagon (7/8 Passenger) (8520 GVWR)
4.6L 3.73 11500
(5216) 5600 (2540) 60 (5.52)
4.6L 4.10 12000
(5443) 6100 (2767) 60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular/RV Van (8600 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 7400 (3357) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7400 (3357) 60 (5.52)
E-150 Extended Van (8600 GVWR)
4.6L 3.73 11500
(5216) 5900 (2676) 60 (5.52)
4.6L 4.10 12000
(5443) 6400 (2903) 60 (5.52)
E-150 Extended Van (8600 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 7300 (3311) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7300 (3311) 60 (5.52)
E-150 Regular Wagon (7/8 Passenger) (8600 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 7000 (3175) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7000 (3175) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
175
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-250 Regular/RV Van (8900 GVWR)
4.6L 3.73 11500
(5216) 6000 (2722) 60 (5.52)
4.6L 4.10 12000
(5443) 6500 (2948) 60 (5.52)
E-250 Extended/RV Van (8900 GVWR)
4.6L 3.73 11500
(5216) 5900 (2676) 60 (5.52)
4.6L 4.10 12000
(5443) 6400 (2903) 60 (5.52)
E-250 Regular/RV Van (9000 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5896) 7400 (3357) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5896) 7400 (3357) 60 (5.52)
E-250 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(8600 GVWR)
4.6L 4.10 12000
(5443) 7500 (3402) 60 (5.52)
E-250 Extended/RV Van (9000 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5896) 7300 (3311) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5896) 7300 (3311) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
176
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Regular/RV Van (9500 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 7300 (3311) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7300 (3311) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 3.73 15000
(6804) 9100 (4128) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended/RV Van (9500 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 7200 (3266) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7200 (3266) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 3.73 15000
(6804) 9000 (4082) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Regular Wagon (11/12 Passenger) (8800 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 6700 (3039) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 6700 (3039) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Regular Wagon (11/12 Passenger) (8700 GVWR)
6.8L 3.73 15000
(6804) 8500 (3856) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
177
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Extended Wagon (11 Passenger) (9300 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 6500 (2948) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 6500 (2948) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Wagon (11 Passenger) (9500 GVWR)
6.8L 3.73 15000
(6804) 8300 (3765 ) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Wagon (14/15 Passenger) (9100 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 6300 (2858) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 6300 (2858) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Wagon (14/15 Passenger) (9300 GVWR)
6.8L 3.73 15000
(6804) 8100 (3674) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9600 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8000 (3629) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Extended Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9600 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 10600
(4808) 5700 (2585) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
178
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (9600 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 9600 (4355) 4700 (2132) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3492) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (10000 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 10050
(4559) 4900 (2223) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(10050 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8000 (3629) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (10050 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 10050
(4559) 4900 (2223) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(11500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3493) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, single rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (9600 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 9600 (4355) 4600 (2087) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
179
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3493) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (10000 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 10050
(4559) 4800 (2177) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(10050 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8000 (3629) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (10050 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 10050
(4559) 4800 (2177) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(11500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3493) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(12500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3493) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
180
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3493) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (10000 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 10050
(4559) 4800 (2177) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel, 4–speed
automatic transmission) (10050 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 10050
(4559) 4800 (2177) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(12500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 7700 (3493) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9000 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 8700 (3946) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8700 (3946) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, single rear wheel)
(9600 GVWR)
5.4L 3.73 13000
(5897) 8600 (3901) 60 (5.52)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8600 (3901) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
181
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8400 (3810) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(11500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8400 (3810) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8300 (3765) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(12500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8300 (3765) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(10000 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8300 (3765) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
182
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-350 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(12500 GVWR)
5.4L 4.10 13000
(5897) 8300 (3765) 60 (5.52)
6.8L 4.10 18500
(8391) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14050 GVWR)
5.4L 4.56 14050
(6373) 8500 (3855) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14050 GVWR)
5.4L 4.56 14050
(6373) 8500 (3855) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14500 GVWR)
6.8L 4.56 20000
(9072) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14500 GVWR)
6.8L 4.56 20000
(9072) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14050 GVWR)
5.4L 4.56 14050
(6373) 9200 (4173) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14050 GVWR)
5.4L 4.56 14050
(6372) 9200 (4173) 60 (5.52)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
183
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum Loaded
Trailer Weight -
lb. (kg)
Maximum
frontal area of
trailer - ft
2
(m
2
)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14500 GVWR)
6.8L 4.56 20000
(9072) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
E-450 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel)
(14500 GVWR)
6.8L 4.56 20000
(9072) 10000 (4536) 60 (5.52)
Maximum trailer weight for all cutaway (E-350 and E-450) vehicles
must be calculated by subtracting the weight of the vehicle (including
incomplete vehicle weight and payload which includes second unit
body weight, cargo and passengers) from the GCW. Otherwise,
maximum trailer weight is 10,000 lb. (4,536 kg).
For high altitude operation reduce GCWR by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation.
To determine the maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle as equipped, follow the section Vehicle loading earlier in this
chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Distribute the load so that only 10–15% of the total is on the tongue. Tie
down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the
hitch.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully after any towing operation.
Do not exceed trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with
bumper only.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
184
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use or install hitches that clamp onto the bumper or to the axle.
Underbody hitches are acceptable if installed properly.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Integrated trailer brake controller (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer
Brake Controller (TBC). When used properly, the TBC helps ensure
Tires, Wheels and Loading
185
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric
brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake
pressure.
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be
compatible with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes
(one to four axles) and not hydraulic surge or electric-over-hydraulic
types. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made.
The TBC user interface consists of
the following:
1. +/- (GAIN adjustment
buttons): Pressing these buttons
will adjust the TBC’s power output
to the trailer brakes (in
0.5 increments). The GAIN setting
can be increased to a maximum of
10.0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and
holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously. The gain
setting will display in the message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
The trailer brake controller (TBC) is designed to display three items of
information in the instrument cluster message center. These are: gain
setting, output bar graph, and trailer connectivity status. They will
appear as follows in the message center.
•TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: The instrument cluster message
center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition
cycle and when adjusting the gain. This message is also displayed
during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain
adjustments are made with no trailer connected.
•TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = //////: When the vehicle’s brake pedal
is pushed, or when the manual control is activated, bar indicators will
illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal
or manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output
with six bars indicating maximum output.
•TRAILER CONNECTED: This message is displayed when a correct
trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) has
been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
186
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•TRAILER DISCONNECTED: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, when a trailer connection was
determined and then a disconnection, either intentionally or
unintentionally, has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. It is also
displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to
appear disconnected. This message is also displayed during manual
activation without a trailer connected.
2. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s
brakes (see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for
instructions on proper use of this feature). If the manual control is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
•Stop Lamps: Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate
both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except
the Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (presuming proper trailer electrical
connection). Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for adjusting GAIN:
The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing
condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking
assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally, and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the TRAILER
CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message
center.
4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or decrease the
GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A GAIN setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
187
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock-up (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the
GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may
not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages:
The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display
the following messages:
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
In the event this message is seen, please contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The TBC may still function,
but performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: This message is displayed when a
Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred. If the
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied
by a single chime, with no trailer connected, the problem is with the
vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7–pin connector in the bumper. If the
message is only displayed with a trailer connected, the problem is related
to the trailer wiring; consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can
be a short to ground (i.e., chaffed wire) or a short to voltage (i.e., pulled
pin on trailer emergency break-away battery) or trailer brakes drawing
too much current.
Note: Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred; however, if the fault
is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford
warranty.
Points to Remember:
•Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first
time.
•Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC (according to procedure above)
whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from those that existed when the gain was initially set.
•The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual
activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the
GAIN. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause
instability of trailer and/or tow vehicle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
188
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The TBC does not
provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock-up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer
and tow vehicle.
•The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle, including
ABS, in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup.
Therefore, if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may
not function at full performance.
•When the vehicle is turned off, the TBC Output is disabled and the
display is shut down. Reactivation of the ignition from OFF to ON will
awaken the TBC module.
•The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item. Ford is not
responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or
customer installation.
•Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5,000 lb (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb (227 kg) tongue weight
capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
•To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a new vehicle.
•To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
•Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
189
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
•To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling.
•Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
When descending long, steep downhill grades, always use a lower gear to
provide engine braking to save wear on brakes. Use Drive (Overdrive
OFF) on moderately steep hills, Second (2) on steep hills, and First (1)
on very steep hills. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they
may overheat and become less effective.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
•Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
•Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
•The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
•If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
•Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) after changing
the rear axle lube.
•After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
•When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place
the gearshift in P (Park) and increase idle speed. This aids engine
cooling and air conditioner efficiency.
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
190
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
•do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
•do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
•causing internal damage to the components.
•affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
All vehicles: Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow
your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
191
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Accessory — allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
2. Lock — locks the automatic
transmission gearshift lever and
allows key removal.
3. Off — shuts off the engine and all
accessories without locking the
steering wheel.
4. On — all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. Start — cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
3
1
2
5
4
Driving
192
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is
set.
•Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
Driving
193
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Turn the key to 4 (on) without
turning the key to 5 (start).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 4 (on) without
turning the key to 5 (start).
2. Turn the key to 5 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 3 (off), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E
85
ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
5
4
Driving
194
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E
85
ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E
85
ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E
85
ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E
85
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information on ethanol.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
For flexible fuel vehicles, if operating with E
85
ethanol, an engine block
heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0°F (-18°C).
Driving
195
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information
on starting with ethanol.
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
•For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
•Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
•Use as short an extension cord as possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
•Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
•To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
•Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
•Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
•Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
Driving
196
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
•Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of power per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately three hours of operation. Block heater operation longer
than three hours will not improve system performance and will
unnecessarily use additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
P!
BRAKE
Driving
197
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), press
the parking brake pedal down until
the pedal stops.
To release, pull the lever (2).
WARNING: Always set the
parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park).
The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate and will remain
illuminated until the parking brake
is released.
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
ABS
P!
BRAKE
P!
BRAKE
Driving
198
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
TRACTION CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a traction control system (TCS). This
system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle,
especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads
and gravel roads. The system will allow your vehicle to make better use
of available traction in these conditions.
During TCS operation, the traction
control active light will flash and the
engine will not “rev-up” when you
push further on the accelerator. This
is normal system behavior and
should be no reason for concern.
WARNING: Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe
personal injury or property damage. The occurrence of a traction
control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The TCS switch, located on the
center console, has an indicator
light that illuminates steadily in the
instrument cluster when the system
is off. The TCS will automatically
turn on every time the ignition is
turned off and on. The TCS should
normally be left on.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the TCS off. This may allow excess wheel spin to
“dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful “rocking” maneuver.
Remember to switch the TCS back on once the vehicle is no longer
stuck.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate steadily in the instrument cluster, the TCS button will not turn
the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized dealer.
Driving
199
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADVANCETRAC姞WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC姞)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威sensors. Reducing the effectiveness
of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system, the “sliding car” icon will
illuminate steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system is
not manually disabled (push the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威“Off ”
button located on the center of the instrument panel). If the “sliding
car” icon still illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威disabled could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Driving
200
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
•Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
•Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
•Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
The AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system automatically enables each time
the engine is started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system
(TCS, ESC, and RSC威) are active and monitor the vehicle from start-up.
However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires
it.
The AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
system includes an AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威“Off” button on the
center of the instrument panel, and
a “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster. The “sliding car”
icon in the instrument cluster
will illuminate temporarily during
start-up as part of a normal system self-check, or during driving if a
driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system to operate.
If the “sliding car” icon illuminates steadily, verify that the
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system is not manually disabled by pressing
the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威“Off” button located on the center stack of
the instrument panel. If the “sliding car” icon remains steadily
illuminated, or if the message center (if equipped) displays SERVICE
RSC NOW, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
When AdvanceTrac威with RSC威performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威with RSC威you may
experience the following:
•A slight deceleration of the vehicle
•The “sliding car” indicator light will flash.
•A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
Driving
201
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
•The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem: Engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
During traction control events the “sliding car” icon in the instrument
cluster will flash.
If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power
reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features.
Anti-lock braking, RSC威, and ESC are not affected by this condition and
will continue to function during the cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威section following.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events the “sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Driving
202
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
•Taking a turn too fast
•Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
•Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
•Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
•Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
•Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
•Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC威operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates the RSC威the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the RSC威system, which
include:
•Emergency lane-change
•Taking a turn too fast
•Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
Switching off AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威
system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This
will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the
obstacle. To switch off the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system partially,
press the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威“Off” button below 20 mph
(32 km/h). Full features of the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system can be
restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威“Off” button again or
if the vehicle is above 20 mph (32 km/h) or by turning off and restarting
the engine.
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the “sliding car” icon will illuminate steadily. Pressing the
Driving
203
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威“Off” button again or if the vehicle is above
20 mph (32 km/h) will turn off the “sliding car” icon. The switch will
not allow partial AdvanceTrac威with RSC威system disabling above
20 mph (32 km/h).
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function; however, ESC and RSC威are
disabled.
AdvanceTrac威with RSC威Features
Button func-
tions
“Sliding
car”
icon
RSC威ESC TCS
Default at
start-up
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Enabled Enabled Enabled
Button pressed
momentarily
Illuminated
solid Enabled Enabled
Disabled
below
20 mph
(32 km/h)
Button pressed
again after de-
activation or
driving above
20 mph
(32 km/h)
Not illumi-
nated Enabled Enabled Enabled
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
•Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
•Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(If the fluid level is below the FULL COLD range on the dipstick).
•Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
•Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
Driving
204
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the FULL COLD
range on the dipstick, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•an improperly inflated tire.
•uneven tire wear.
•loose or worn suspension components.
•loose or worn steering components.
•improper steering alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
Driving
205
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower
speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading
or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Vehicle stability and handling
The risk of a rollover crash increases as the number of people and load
in the vehicle increase. This increased risk occurs because the passenger
weight and load raises the vehicle’s center of gravity and causes it to
shift rearward. As a result, the van has less resistance to rollover and
handles differently from other commonly driven passenger vehicles,
making it more difficult to control in an emergency situation. Placing any
load on the roof also raises the center of gravity and increases the
potential for rollover.
The van should be operated by an experienced driver. An organization
that owns a 15–passenger van should select one or two experienced
drivers to drive the van on a regular basis. These drivers will gain
valuable experience handling the van. This experience will help make
each trip safer.
The van should be operated at a safe speed which, in some conditions,
may be less than the posted speed limit.
Further, all occupants should be properly restrained. Most people killed
in rollover crashes were unbelted. Occupants can dramatically reduce
their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simply
using their seat belts. Organizations that own 15–passenger vans should
have a written seat belt use policy. Drivers should be responsible for
enforcing the policy.
Driving
206
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Emergency maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
The vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
Driving
207
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, and turn
the ignition to the on position.
2. Remove the lower trim panel
under the steering column. Make
sure not disturb the wires on the
electrical connector.
3. Locate the brake-shift interlock
solenoid underneath the steering
column.
4. With your hand, pull back on the
solenoid, and at the same time, shift
the transmission into N (Neutral).
5. Start the vehicle.
See your authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this
procedure is used.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Driving
208
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage during coasting or deceleration. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy.
Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need
to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset
your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected.
The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to
relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take
several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning
process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process,
normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Driving
209
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The O/D OFF lamp will illuminate in
the instrument cluster.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
•This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
•O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
•Provides engine braking.
•Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in
and out of overdrive occurs, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing
and when engine braking is required.
•To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
•O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
O/D
ON/OFF
O/D
OFF
Driving
210
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
•Provides engine braking.
•Use to start-up on slippery roads.
•To return to (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
•Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped - 5.4L and 6.8L gasoline engines only)
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage during coasting or deceleration. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy.
Adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need
to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset
your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected.
Driving
211
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The adaptive transmission shift strategy allows the transmission to
relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take
several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning
process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process,
normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul on
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
Driving
212
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
Driving
213
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped - diesel engines only)
This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need
to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset
your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected.
The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy allows the transmission to
relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take
several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning
process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process,
normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
•Start the engine
•Press the brake pedal
•Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
•Come to a complete stop
•Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Driving
214
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
D (Drive) with Overdrive is the normal driving position for the best fuel
economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Drive) without Overdrive
D (Drive) without Overdrive can be
activated by pressing the
transmission control switch (TCS)
on the end of the gearshift lever.
•This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
•The O/D OFF lamp will illuminate
in the instrument cluster.
•Provides engine braking.
•Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in
and out of overdrive occurs, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing
and when engine braking is required.
•To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
•O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
O/D
ON/OFF
O/D
OFF
Driving
215
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides additional engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in D (Drive) with Overdrive or D (Drive) without Overdrive.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Driving
216
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in reverse and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
Driving
217
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The RSS detects obstacles up to
6 feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning, on some radios, the volume will be reduced to
a predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
Driving
218
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera system located
on the back door provides a video
image, which appears in the
rearview mirror or navigation screen
(if equipped), of the area behind the
vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while reversing or reverse
parking the vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display on the left portion of the rearview mirror or on the
navigation screen (if equipped). The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
•(1) Rear bumper
•(2) Red zone
•(3) Yellow zone
•(4) Green zone
•(5) Centerline of vehicle
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones.
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle.
Image delay if displayed through the rearview mirror:
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.
Image delay if displayed through the navigation screen:
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image in the navigation screen will remain until the vehicle speed
reaches five mph (8 km/h), only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or
until any navigation radio button is pressed.
Driving
219
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the
rear camera delay feature to on or off.
When towing, the camera system will only see what is being towed
behind the vehicle; this might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
The camera lens for the camera is located on the back door. Keep the
lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the backdoor
open.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Driving
220
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Servicing
•If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
•If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
BLIND SPOT MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Blind spot mirrors have an
integrated convex spotter mirror
built into the upper outboard corner
of the outside mirrors. They are
designed to assist the driver by
increasing visibility along the side of
the vehicle. For more information on
your side view mirrors, refer to
Exterior mirrors in the Driver
Controls chapter.
Driving with blind spot mirrors
Before a lane change, check the
main mirror first, then check the
blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are
present in the blind spot mirror and
the traffic in the adjacent lane is at
a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over
your shoulder to verify traffic is
clear, and carefully change lanes.
When the approaching vehicle is at
a distance, its image is small and
near the inboard edge of the main
mirror. As the vehicle approaches,
the image becomes larger and
begins to move outboard across the
main mirror (1). As the vehicle
approaches its image will transition
from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror (2).
As the vehicle leaves the blind spot
mirror it will transition to the driver’s peripheral field of view (3).
3
2
1
Driving
221
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off or PTO, is often added to the
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a
wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service and
pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the
powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle
that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket PTO
system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application, is
responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or
powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and
proper operation.
Your vehicle is qualified for use as a stationary power source, within
limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford Truck Body Builders
Advisory Service.
Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous
operation as a stationary power source, due to the potential for the
normal venting of fuel vapors. For stationary PTO operation of extended
duration (beyond 10 minutes), diesel engine is recommended. Further
consult your aftermarket PTO installer, since the duration of operation
limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of.
Driving
222
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
Driving
223
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
•24–hours, seven days a week
•for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
•a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
•battery jump start
•lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
•fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
•winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
•towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
•coverage period
•exact fuel amounts
Roadside Emergencies
224
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•towing of your disabled vehicle
•emergency travel expense reimbursement
•travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
Motorhome customers in the U.S and Canada should contact
1-800-444-3311.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1-800-665-2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Roadside Emergencies
225
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
(DIESEL-POWERED AND STRIPPED CHASSIS VEHICLES ONLY)
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
On diesel-powered vehicles, this
switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, by the kick
panel.
Roadside Emergencies
226
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
On commercial stripped chassis
vehicles, this switch is located on a
bracket above the brake pedal.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition on.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to off.
6. Make another check for leaks.
Fuel pump shut-off (gas engines except stripped chassis)
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.
Roadside Emergencies
227
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — — —
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located to the left of the brake pedal and mounted
onto the lower left cowl panel. Remove the fuse panel cover to access
the fuses.
15
Roadside Emergencies
228
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery,
disconnecting the primary under-hood battery DOES NOT remove
power from all circuits.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the inside of the
fuse panel cover.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
1 30A Not used (spare)
2 15A Not used (spare)
3 15A Not used (spare)
4 30A Not used (spare)
Roadside Emergencies
229
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
5 10A Passenger compartment fuse panel
(SPDJB)/Brake-shift interlock
6 20A Turn signal, Hazard, Stop lamps
7 10A Left low beam
8 10A Right low beam
9 15A Courtesy lamps
10 15A Switch illumination
11 10A Not used (spare)
12 7.5A Not used (spare)
13 5A Mirrors
14 10A SYNC威, GPS module
15 10A Satellite radio
16 15A Not used (spare)
17 20A Door locks
18 20A Not used (spare)
19 25A Not used (spare)
20 15A Diagnostic connector
(except stripped chassis)
21 15A Not used (spare)
22 15A Park lamps, License plate lamps
23 15A High beams
24 20A Horn (except stripped chassis)
25 10A Demand lighting
26 10A Cluster (except stripped chassis)
27 20A Ignition switch feed
28 5A Audio mute (start)
29 5A Cluster (except stripped chassis)
30 5A Not used (spare)
31 10A Not used (spare)
32 10A Restraints module
33 10A Trailer brake controller
Roadside Emergencies
230
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
34 5A Not used (spare)
35 10A Reverse park aid, Rear video camera,
Cutaway run/start
36 5A Passive anti-theft system (PATS) RF
module
37 10A Climate control, Stripped chassis IP #1
run/start
38 20A Not used (spare)
39 20A Radio, Navigation
40 20A Amplifier
41 15A Radio, Switch illumination, Reverse
camera mirror, Automatic dimming rear
view mirror
42 10A Upfitter switch
43 10A Stripped chassis IP connector #1
44 10A Auxiliary battery relay/Trailer tow
battery charger relay
45 5A Wipers, Stripped chassis Engine
connector 3
46 7.5A Passenger airbag deactivation indicator
(PADI)
47 30A circuit
breaker
Windows accessory delay
48 Relay Delayed accessory
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
Roadside Emergencies
231
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery,
disconnecting the primary under-hood battery DOES NOT remove
power from all circuits.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
1 HC Micro Relay Powertrain control module (PCM)
2 HC Micro Relay Starter solenoid
3 HC Micro Relay Wiper
4 HC Micro Relay Trailer tow battery charge
5 HC Micro Relay Fuel pump
6 HC Micro Relay Trailer tow park lamp
7 HC Micro Relay Upfitter #4
8 HC Micro Relay Upfitter #3
9 HC Micro Relay Modified vehicle and stripped chassis
run/start
Roadside Emergencies
232
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
10 HC ISO Fuel injector control module (FICM)
relay (Diesel engine only)
11 — Not used
12 40A** Modified vehicle and stripped chassis
run/start
13 30A** Starter solenoid relay
14 40A** Run start relay
15 40A** Modified vehicle and stripped chassis
battery
16 50A** Auxiliary A/C blower
17 50A** Auxiliary battery feed, Trailer tow
battery charge, trailer tow park feed
18 30A** Electric trailer brake, Trailer brake
controller
19 30A** Upfitter #1
20 30A** Upfitter #2
21 50A** FICM relay (diesel engine only)
22 — Not used
23 G8VA relay A/C clutch
24 G8VA relay Horn relay (Stripped chassis)
25 HC Micro relay Run/start
26 — Not used
27 — Not used
28 20A* Back up lamp
29 10A* A/C clutch
30 10A* Brake on/off (BOO) switch
31 10A* Cluster battery (stripped chassis
only), FICM coil (diesel engine only)
32 50A** Blower motor
33 40A** Anti-lock brake system (ABS) pump
34 20A** Stripped chassis horn
35 40A** PCM relay
Roadside Emergencies
233
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
36 20A** Ignition switch
(Stripped chassis only)
37 G8VA relay Trailer tow stop — left turn signal
38 G8VA relay Trailer tow stop — right turn signal
39 G8VA relay Back up lamp
40 ISO relay Blower motor
41 10A* Charging (diesel engine only)
42 15A* Diagnostic connector
(stripped chassis)
43 20A* Fuel pump
44 10A* Upfitter #3
45 15A* Upfitter #4
46 10A* PCM keep alive power, Canister vent,
PCM relay coil
47 40A** ABS coil
48 20A** Trailer tow stop lamp/turn signal
49 30A** Wiper motor
50 — Not used
51 20A** Cutaway
52 10A* Stripped chassis and modified vehicle
run/start relay coil
53 10A* ABS run/start feed
54 10A* Fuel pump relay coil
(gas engine only)
55 10A* PCM (diesel engine only)
56 20A* Diesel fuel conditioner module
(DFCM) (diesel engine only)
57 20A* Trailer tow park lamp
58 15A* Trailer tow backup lamp
59 — Not used
60 — One touch integrated start (OTIS)
(diode)
Roadside Emergencies
234
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
61 — Auxiliary battery (diode)
62 HC Micro relay Upfitter #2
63 30A** Trailer tow battery charge
64 — Not used
65 20A** Power point 2 (glove box)
66 20A** Power point 3 (left-hand B-pillar)
67 20A** Power point 1 (instrument panel)
68 50A** Modified vehicle
69 — Not used
70 30A** Stripped chassis
71 — Not used
72 20A** Cigar lighter
73 — Not used
74 30A** Power seat
75 20A* Vehicle power (VPWR) 1, PCM power
76 20A* VPWR 2, PCM – emission related
powertrain components
77 10A* VPWR 3, PCM – general powertrain
components
78 15A* VPWR 4 (gas engine only), Ignition
coil (diesel engine only), Fuel pump
relay coil
79 10A* VPWR 5, Transmission
80 10A* Cluster run/start
(stripped chassis only)
81 15A* FICM logic (diesel engine only)
82 — Not used
83 — Fuel pump (diode)
84 — Not used
85 HC Micro relay Upfitter #1
* Mini fuses ** A1S fuses
Roadside Emergencies
235
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
Roadside Emergencies
236
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
•Tow a trailer
•Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
•Use commercial car washing equipment
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
•Use commercial car washing equipment
•Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
Roadside Emergencies
237
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
•Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer
•Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
•Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Full-size matching spare tire/wheel information
This spare tire/wheel will match the road tire/wheel. When driving with
the full size matching spare tire/wheel, do not exceed 70 mph
(113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if you
need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing your vehicle
1. Park on a level surface.
2. Activate the warning flashers.
3. Place the gearshift in P (Park).
4. Apply the parking brake and turn
the engine off.
Spare tire information
The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed under the rear of your vehicle
(except cutaway and stripped chassis models).
Roadside Emergencies
238
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the rear doors and remove
the thumb screw and anti-theft
bracket. If finger pressure will not
remove the thumb screw, use the
lug wrench to loosen the screw.
2. Remove the access plug under
the left door.
3. Remove the jack handle from the
right side compartment and insert
the tip of the jack handle through
the access hole and into the tube.
4. Turn the jack handle
counterclockwise until the cable is
slack and the tire can be slid from
under the vehicle.
5. Remove the retainer from the
spare tire.
To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed, turn the jack handle
clockwise until all slack is removed.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Roadside Emergencies
239
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire you are changing.
On E-450 vehicles, the parking brake is on the transmission. Therefore,
the vehicle will not be prevented from moving when a rear wheel is
lifted, even if the parking brake is applied. Be sure to block both
directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is
being lifted.
2. Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location.
•The jack is located in the rear
right-hand side of the cargo area.
3. Remove any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench
behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off.
4. Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut
wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the
wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground.
Roadside Emergencies
240
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). To help prevent
the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the
parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked.
Replacing the tire
1. Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack. Use
the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle.
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not
start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only
meant for changing the tire.
2. Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel.
•Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
Roadside Emergencies
241
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Rear axle jacking points - All
models except E-350 Dual Rear
Wheel (DRW) and E-450:
Rear axle jacking points - E-350
Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) and
E-450:
Front axle jacking points:
Place the jack under the pin on the
front surface of the front axle.
Do not place the jack under or
on the steering linkage.
3. Raise the jack until the wheel is
completely off the ground. (Turn
jack handle clockwise if your vehicle
is equipped with a screw-type jack
or pump the jack if equipped with a
hydraulic jack.)
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
nut wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire.
Roadside Emergencies
242
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, thread the lug nuts on the studs
with the beveled face toward the wheel.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, thread the two element swiveling
lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel.
6. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against the wheel.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the following pattern
(Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for
the proper lug nut torque specification):
WARNING: Never use
wheels or lug nuts different
than the original equipment as
this could damage the wheel or
mounting system. This damage
could allow the wheels to come off
while the vehicle is being driven.
9. Install any wheel covers,
ornaments or hub caps. Make sure they are snapped in place.
10. Stow the jack, handle and lug wrench.
11. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
Roadside Emergencies
243
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size and wheel
lug nut type
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
9/16 x 18 conical lug
nut
150 200
9/16 x 18 two-piece
lug nut
140 190
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Roadside Emergencies
244
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut. Do not
apply motor oil to the wheel nut
threads or the wheel stud threads.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine;
if your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the 6.0 and 6.4
Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide
Supplement for the proper jump starting procedure.
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
Roadside Emergencies
245
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
246
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
247
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
248
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
249
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
250
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam and must be towed from the
front, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed by wheel lift or
flatbed equipment to prevent damage to the air dam.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Roadside Emergencies
251
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
•Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
•Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
•Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
Roadside Emergencies
252
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft威parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
by Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
•Owner Guides
•Maintenance Schedules
•Recalls
•Ford Extended Service Plans
•Ford Genuine Accessories
•Service specials and promotions.
Customer Assistance
253
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing Address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing Address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Away from home–motorhome service
If you own a motorhome built on a Ford Chassis and are away from
home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than
the authorized dealer could provide, after following the steps above,
contact the Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealer or service location to help you. In the United States
and Canada:
Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center
900 N. Lake Havasu Avenue
Lake Havasu City, AZ 86403
1-800-444-3311
Open 365/24/7
In order to help service your motorhome vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Motorhome
Customer Assistance Center:
•telephone number where you can be reached
•vehicle location (city and state)
•year and make of your vehicle
•date of vehicle purchase
Customer Assistance
254
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•current odometer reading
•vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Your telephone number (home and business)
•The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
Customer Assistance
255
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
Customer Assistance
256
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
Customer Assistance
257
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Customer Assistance
258
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
Customer Assistance
259
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
•Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
•Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
•Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
•It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
•Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
•Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
•If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
•Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
•Use Motorcraft威Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
•Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
Cleaning
260
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft威
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
WAXING
•Wash the vehicle first.
•Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
•Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
•Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with the sliding door
electrical contact switches. Paint sealant or other contaminants could
interfere with the proper operation of the power locks or radio
speakers. If necessary, clean the contacts with Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42) to remove any sealant. Do not use any abrasives on
the contact surfaces.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
•Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
•Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
•Clean weekly with Motorcraft威Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
•Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
•Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
Cleaning
261
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
•To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
•Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
Cleaning
262
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
•For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
•If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
•The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
•The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
•Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Cleaning
263
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
•Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
•Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
Cleaning
264
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
•If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
•For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
•If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive leather.
•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning
265
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft威Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft威Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft威Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
Cleaning
266
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Maintenance and Specifications
267
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the auxiliary latch, located in
the center top of the grille, to the left to release the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
HOOD
Maintenance and Specifications
268
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component
locations.
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
4. Air filter assembly
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Power distribution box
10. Battery
Maintenance and Specifications
269
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Maintenance and Specifications
270
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Press the lock
tab to release the blade and pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from the
arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
Maintenance and Specifications
271
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
•If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between
the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil
level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
•If the oil level is below the lower
hole or the MIN mark, add
enough oil to raise the level
within the lower and upper holes
or within the MIN-MAX range.
•Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
Maintenance and Specifications
272
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
Maintenance and Specifications
273
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft威maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its
life of service.
WARNING: This vehicle may be equipped with more than one
battery, removal of cable from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical system. Be sure to disconnect cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property damage.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Maintenance and Specifications
274
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Automatic transmission operation in the
Driving chapter.
Auxiliary battery (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a frame-mounted auxiliary battery
located on the passenger side frame rail, behind the front passenger
door. This auxiliary battery is connected to the auxiliary battery relay, so
it is not used to start the vehicle.
Maintenance and Specifications
275
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Battery relearn
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
•The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content
for flexible fuel vehicles.
•If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality
of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
•For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been
relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Maintenance and Specifications
276
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
•Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
•Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
•Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
•Proper function of calibrated gauges.
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
Maintenance and Specifications
277
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
•The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
•Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
•Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Maintenance and Specifications
278
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
•Do not mix coolants. Add the coolant type originally equipped
in your vehicle. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
•A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Maintenance and Specifications
279
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Maintenance and Specifications
280
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
•It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
•NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
•Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
•Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
•NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
•Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
•Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
•Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
Maintenance and Specifications
281
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If fail-safe cooling activates, pull off the road as
soon as safely possible, and turn the engine off, because the
engine may automatically shut off while driving without further
indication.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
•The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
•The service engine soon indicator light will illuminate.
•The engine coolant temperature indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Maintenance and Specifications
282
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
Maintenance and Specifications
283
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for
hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
•FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol. Any fuel
blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as
“Fuel Ethanol.” To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, it may be
equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text “E85/Gasoline”, or check
if there is a label on the fuel filler door.
Maintenance and Specifications
284
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn
and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small
amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The
resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is
denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to
Starting in the Driving chapter.
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded
gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Maintenance and Specifications
285
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
•Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
•Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
•Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
•Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
•Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
•Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the ground.
•DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
•DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel filler cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
If the check fuel cap light or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
Maintenance and Specifications
286
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light or “check fuel
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light or “check fuel cap”
message on may cause the light to turn on as well.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
is not used.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
personal injury.
FFV (Flex Fuel Vehicle) fuel cap
If your vehicle is FFV capable, it will have a yellow colored fuel cap.
Maintenance and Specifications
287
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Choosing the right fuel
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your
vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some stations offer fuels posted as
“Regular” with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily under most
driving conditions while you are
using fuel with the recommended
octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
FFV engine (if equipped)
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol
(Ed75–Ed85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two
fuels.
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be
invalidated.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Maintenance and Specifications
288
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you
should follow a different maintenance schedule. In addition to this, if you
exclusively use E85 fuel, it is also recommended to fill the fuel tank with
regular unleaded gasoline once every 3,000 miles (4,800 km). See
scheduled maintenance information for more information.
Fuel quality
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
•Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
•The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Maintenance and Specifications
289
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
•Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
•Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
•Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
•Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
•Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
•Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Maintenance and Specifications
290
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
•Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
•Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
•Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
•Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
•Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
•Slow down gradually.
•Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
•Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
•Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
Maintenance and Specifications
291
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
•Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
•Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
•Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
•Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
•Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
•Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
•Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
•Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
•Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
•Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
•Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact
Maintenance and Specifications
292
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
your authorized dealer if the Monroney label is not supplied with your
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
Note: Vehicles over 8,500 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) will not have fuel
economy information printed on the window sticker.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
•Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Maintenance and Specifications
293
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
Maintenance and Specifications
294
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
Maintenance and Specifications
295
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for more information.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20°-80°F
(-7°-25°C):
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this
range.
2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine.
3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
4. Turn the engine off.
WARNING: For E-350 and E-450 vehicles with the Hydro-Boost
Brake System, do not press the brake pedal after the engine has
been turned off. Pressing the brake pedal after the engine has been
turned off will give a false power steering fluid level reading.
5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
FULL COLD
Maintenance and Specifications
296
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the
dipstick back in the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
•E-150/E-350 Single Rear Wheel
•E-350/E-450 Dual Rear Wheel
The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range; there is no need to add
fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the
performance of the system could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for
maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with
universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be
necessary.
Maintenance and Specifications
297
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about
30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Maintenance and Specifications
298
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
299
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F [66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
300
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
301
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD
Maintenance and Specifications
302
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic transmission fluid filter
The Torqshift automatic
transmission is equipped with a
serviceable transmission fluid filter
located inside the transmission
bottom pan.
Refer to scheduled maintenance
information for service intervals for
automatic transmission fluid and
transmission filter.
For transmission filter maintenance,
see your authorized dealer.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Maintenance and Specifications
303
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the air filter element
1. Disconnect the fresh air inlet tube
from the radiator support.
2. Open the clamp that secures the
two halves of the air filter housing
together.
3. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
4. Remove the air filter element
from the housing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
6. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.
7. Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the radiator support.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
Maintenance and Specifications
304
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component* 4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10
engine
Air filter element FA-1632 FA-1632 FA-1632
Battery-
standard /
(auxiliary)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S FL-820-S
Spark plugs
1
Torqshift
automatic
transmission
internal
bottom–pan
filter
2
— FT-180 FT-180
*Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft威diesel engine service
part numbers.
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
2
Also available with 6.0L diesel engine/TorqShift transmission.
Maintenance and Specifications
305
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Brake fluid Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Motorcraft威High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Door weatherstrips — Silicone Spray Lubricant XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
Hinges, latches, Striker plates,
fuel filler door hinge, and seat
tracks
—Motorcraft威
Multi-Purpose Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders — Motorcraft威Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Engine coolant
(4.6L engine) 23.8 quarts (22.6L)
Motorcraft威Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
with bittering agent
(yellow-colored)
1
VC-7-B /
WSS-M97B51-A1
Engine coolant
(4.6L engine with aux rear
heat)
26.0 quarts (24.6L)
Engine coolant
(5.4L engine) 28.8 quarts (27.2L)
Engine coolant
(5.4L engine with aux rear
heat)
30.8 quarts (29.1L)
Engine coolant
(6.8L engine) 30.4 quarts (28.8L)
Engine coolant
(6.8L engine with aux rear
heat)
32.6 quarts (30.8L)
Engine coolant-diesel engine
1
Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Maintenance and Specifications
306
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Cooling system stop leak
pellets —Motorcraft威Cooling
System Stop Leak Pellets
VC-6 /
WSS-M99B37-B6
Engine oil 6.0 quarts (5.7L)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft威SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
2
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A with API
Certification Mark
Engine oil-diesel engine Refer to the 6.0L and 6.4L Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Power steering fluid Keep in FULL range
on dipstick
Motorcraft威
MERCON威VATF
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威V
Automatic transmission fluid
(4R75E) 13.9 quarts (13.1L)
3
Motorcraft威
MERCON威LV ATF
4
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威LV
Automatic transmission fluid
TorqShift (5–speed) 18.8 quarts (17.7L)
3
Motorcraft威
MERCON威LV ATF
4
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威LV
Limited Slip axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E-350 with 4.10 axle ratio
5.9 pints (2.8L)
5,7
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
Rear Axle Lubricant
6
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Maintenance and Specifications
307
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E–250/E–350
5.9 pints (2.8L)
5,7
SAE 90 Hypoid Gear Oil XY–90–GL /
ESW-M2C105-E
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
6.6 pints (3.1L)
7
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
9.0 pints (4.3L)
7
Dana conventional axle fluid
M60 (M248) E-350 with 4.10
axle ratio
6.2 pints (2.9L)
7
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
Rear Axle Lubricant
6
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Dana conventional axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E-150/E-350
6.2 pints (2.9 L)
7
SAE 80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Dana conventional axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
6.6 pints (3.1L)
7
Dana conventional axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
9.0 pints (4.3 L)
7
Windshield washer fluid 4.2 quarts (4.0L)
Motorcraft威Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Maintenance and Specifications
308
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Fuel tank–all regular and
extended length vans and
wagons
35.0 gallons
(132.4L)
——
Fuel tank–138 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
40.0 gallons
(151.0L)
Fuel tank–158 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
40.0 gallons
(151.0L)
8
Fuel tank–176 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
40.0 gallons
(151.0L)
8
Fuel tank–158 inch and
176 inch wheelbase (E-Super
Duty)
55.0 gallons
(208.0L)
1
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford
specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size, if equipped with an in-tank
cooler, if equipped with an oil to air cooler and if equipped with a remote filter assembly. The amount of transmission fluid and
fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威LV should only use MERCON威LV fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause
transmission damage.
5
Dana limited-slip axle (M60) requires 8 oz. (228 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford
specification EST-M2C118-A.
6
If your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant it is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants do
not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in
water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
7
Fill Dana rear axles to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
8
Optional fuel tank 55.0 gallons (208.0L).
Maintenance and Specifications
309
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE DATA
Engine
1
4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 en-
gine
Cubic inches 281 330 415
Required fuel 87 octane or
E85
2
87 octane or
E85
2
87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-
4-9
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.041–0.047 inch
(1.04–1.20mm)
0.051–0.057 inch
(1.29–1.45mm)
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42mm)
Compression
ratio
9.4:1 9.0:1 9.0:1
1
Refer to the 6.0 and 6.4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine information.
2
4.6L V8 and 5.4L V8 FFV engines only.
Engine drivebelt routing
•4.6L V8, 5.4L V8 and 6.8L V10 engines without A/C
Maintenance and Specifications
310
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•4.6L V8, 5.4L V8 and 6.8L V10 engines with A/C
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(complete Ford built vehicles)
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label is located on the
structure (B-Pillar) by the trailing edge of the driver’s door or the edge
of the driver’s door.
Maintenance and Specifications
311
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The VIN is located on the driver side instrument panel or on the
certification label. It contains the following information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Certification label for incomplete vehicles
On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles, the certification label is
affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of
the completed vehicle. In these cases the completed vehicle is
manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate
manufacturers.
Maintenance and Specifications
312
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Four-speed automatic overdrive (4R75E) Q
Five-speed automatic TorqShift with Tow/Haul T
Five-speed automatic 5R110W-Hi/Torque B
Maintenance and Specifications
313
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
•12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
•the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Running boards
Interior style
Cargo organization
Electrochromic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Trailer hitches and towing accessories
Accessories
314
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Peace of mind
Keyless entry keypad
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
•Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
•To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
•Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Accessories
315
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
•Factory-trained technicians.
•Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
•Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
Ford Extended Service Plan
316
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
•Wiper blades •Brake pads and linings
•Spark plugs
(except California) •Shock absorbers
•Clutch disc •Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
Ford Extended Service Plan
317
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
318
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A
Accessory delay ..........................65
AdvanceTrac ..............................200
Air cleaner filter ...............303–305
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ................................102–103
and child safety seats ............104
description ..............................103
disposal ....................................107
driver airbag ............................105
indicator light .........................106
operation .................................105
passenger airbag .....................105
passenger deactivation
switch ......................................108
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze (see Engine
coolant) .....................................277
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................197–198
Anti-theft system ........................81
arming the system ....................82
Audio system (see Radio) ...29, 31
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................209, 211, 214
fluid, adding ............................298
fluid, checking ........................298
fluid, refill capacities ..............306
fluid, specification ..................306
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................38
Auxiliary power point .................63
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........306
refill capacities ........................306
traction lok ..............................205
B
Battery .......................................274
acid, treating emergencies .....274
jumping a disabled battery ....245
maintenance-free ....................274
replacement, specifications ...305
servicing ..................................274
Belt-Minder威...............................98
Blind Spot Spotter Mirror ........221
Booster seats .............................130
Brakes ........................................197
anti-lock ...........................197–198
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................198
fluid, checking and adding ....297
fluid, refill capacities ..............306
fluid, specifications .................306
lubricant specifications ..........306
parking ....................................198
shift interlock ..........................207
trailer .......................................185
Bulbs ............................................55
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....306
Cell phone use ............................10
Changing a tire .........................236
Child safety seats ......................117
in front seat ............................118
in rear seat ..............................118
LATCH .....................................121
recommendations ...................115
tether anchorage hardware ...127
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................130
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............262
Index
319
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
exterior ....................................265
instrument panel ....................264
interior .....................................265
plastic parts ............................263
safety belts ..............................265
washing ....................................260
waxing .....................................261
wheels ......................................261
wiper blades ............................263
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......47–49
Clock adjust
AM/FM Stereo ...........................30
AM/FM/CD .................................32
Compass, electronic ....................24
calibration .................................24
set zone adjustment .................24
Controls
power seat .................................87
steering column ........................69
Coolant
checking and adding ..............277
refill capacities ................280, 306
specifications ..........................306
Cruise control (see Speed
control) ........................................67
Customer Assistance ................224
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................316
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................258
Getting roadside assistance ...224
Getting the service you
need .........................................253
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................258
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................257
D
Daytime running lamps (see
Lamps) .........................................50
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................298
engine oil .................................271
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................297
Driving under special
conditions
through water .........................223
E
Electronic message center .........21
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................245
Emergency Flashers .................225
Emission control system ..........293
Engine ........................................310
cleaning ...................................262
coolant .....................................277
diesel ...........................................7
fail-safe cooling .......................281
idle speed control ...................274
lubrication specifications .......306
refill capacities ........................306
service points ..................269–270
starting after a collision .........226
Engine block heater .................195
Engine oil ..................................271
checking and adding ..............271
dipstick ....................................271
filter, specifications ........273, 305
recommendations ...................273
refill capacities ........................306
specifications ..........................306
Index
320
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Event data recording ....................8
Exhaust fumes ..........................195
F
Fail safe cooling ........................281
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....283
Fluid capacities .........................306
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................205
Fuel ............................................283
calculating fuel
economy ............................24, 290
cap ...........................................286
capacity ...................................306
choosing the right fuel ...........288
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................292
detergent in fuel .....................288
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................283, 286, 290
filter, specifications ........283, 305
fuel pump shut-off switch .....226
improving fuel economy ........290
octane rating ...................288, 310
quality ......................................289
running out of fuel .................289
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................283
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .................................283, 288
Fuses ..........................................228
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............286
Gas mileage (see Fuel
economy) ...................................290
Gauges .........................................19
H
Hazard flashers .........................225
Head restraints ...........................85
Headlamps ...................................50
aiming ........................................53
bulb specifications ....................56
daytime running lights .............50
flash to pass ..............................51
high beam .................................50
replacing bulbs .........................57
turning on and off ....................50
Heating
heater only system .............47, 49
heating and air conditioning
system .......................................48
Hood ..........................................268
I
Ignition ...............................192, 310
Illuminated visor mirror .............63
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................117
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................295
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................264
cluster ........................................14
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................51
J
Jack ............................................236
positioning ...............................236
storage .....................................236
Jump-starting your vehicle ......245
Index
321
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................72
Keys .............................................83
positions of the ignition .........192
L
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................56
daytime running light ...............50
headlamps .................................50
headlamps, flash to pass ..........51
instrument panel, dimming .....51
interior lamps ...........................54
replacing bulbs .........................57
LATCH anchors .........................121
Lights, warning and indicator ....14
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........198
Load limits .................................167
Loading instructions .................174
Locks
autolock .....................................72
doors ..........................................72
Lubricant specifications ...........306
Lug nuts ....................................244
Lumbar support, seats ...............87
M
Message center ...........................21
english/metric button ...............26
warning messages .....................26
Mirrors ...................................65–66
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................65
fold away ...................................67
side view mirrors (power) .......66
Motorcraft威parts ..............266, 305
N
Navigation system .......................46
O
Octane rating ............................288
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................271
P
Parking brake ............................198
Parts (see Motorcraft威
parts) .........................................305
Power distribution box (see
Fuses) ........................................231
Power door locks ........................72
Power mirrors .............................66
Power point .................................63
Power steering ..........................204
fluid, checking and adding ....296
fluid, refill capacity ................306
fluid, specifications .................306
Power Windows ...........................64
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................205
R
Radio ......................................29, 31
Rear-view camera system .........219
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................115
Relays ........................................228
Index
322
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Remote entry system .................77
illuminated entry ......................81
locking/unlocking
doors ..............................72, 78–79
panic alarm ...............................79
replacement/additional
transmitters ...............................80
replacing the batteries .............79
Reverse sensing system ...........217
Roadside assistance ..................224
Roll stability control .................200
S
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..............................93–97
Safety defects, reporting ..........259
Safety restraints ....................93–97
Belt-Minder威.............................98
extension assembly ................102
for adults .............................94–96
for children .............................112
warning light and chime ..........98
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................121
Safety seats for children ..........117
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................311
Satellite Radio Information ........43
Seats ............................................85
child safety seats ....................117
front seats .................................86
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ....................................81, 83
Servicing your vehicle ..............267
Setting the clock
AM/FM single CD .....................32
AM/FM stereo ...........................30
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............106
Spare tire (see Changing the
Tire) ...........................................238
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................305, 310
Special notice ................................8
ambulance conversions ..............7
diesel-powered vehicles .............7
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................306
Speed control ..............................67
Stability system .........................200
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......194
Starting your vehicle ........192–194
jump starting ..........................245
Steering wheel
controls ......................................69
tilting .........................................63
SYNC威..........................................46
T
Temperature control (see
Climate control) ....................47, 49
Tilt steering wheel ......................63
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....154
Tires ...........................136–137, 236
alignment ................................146
care ..........................................142
changing ..........236, 238–239, 241
checking the pressure ............141
inflating ...................................138
label .........................................153
replacing ..........................144, 241
rotating ....................................146
Index
323
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
safety practices .......................145
sidewall information ...............148
snow tires and chains ............166
spare tire .........................236, 238
terminology .............................137
tire grades ...............................137
treadwear ........................136, 143
Towing .......................................174
recreational towing .................191
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............185
trailer towing ..........................174
wrecker ....................................251
Traction control ........................199
Traction-lok rear axle ...............205
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................185
Transmission .............................209
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....207
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................298
fluid, refill capacities ..............306
lubricant specifications ..........306
Turn signal ..................................54
U
Upfitter controls .........................70
USB port ......................................40
V
Vehicle loading ..........................167
Ventilating your vehicle ...........195
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......14
Washer fluid ..............................270
Water, Driving through .............223
Windows
power .........................................64
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................62
checking and adding fluid .....270
replacing wiper blades ...........271
Wrecker towing .........................251
Index
324
2010 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)

Navigation menu